ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
M3 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M3.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M3's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW M3 throughout an extended ser-
vice life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
© 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/08, 08 09 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 238.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
42 Adjustments
53 Transporting children safely
55 Driving
68 Everything under control
81 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
92 Lamps
96 Climate
101 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
116 Things to remember when driving
121 BMW M3 engineering
Navigation
126 Navigation system
127 Destination entry
137 Destination guidance
143 What to do if …
Entertainment
146 On/off and tone
149 Radio
152 Satellite radio
154 CD player and CD changer
161 Music collection
165 AUX-IN port
166 USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio
interface
Communications
172 Telephone
183 Contacts
185 BMW Assist
Mobility
194 Refueling
196 Wheels and tires
202 Under the hood
207 Maintenance
209 Care
213 Replacing components
221 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
228 Technical data
232 Short commands for the voice activation
system
238 Everything from A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet avail-
able at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
* to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Notes
6
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 48
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
* 48
1
Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 36
2
Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 35
3
Opening and closing front
windows 35
6
Parking lamps/low beams 92
Low beams 92
Automatic headlamp control
* 92
Adaptive Head Light
* 93
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8 Instrument cluster 12
11 Ignition lock 55
12 Buttons on the steering wheel
13 Horn: the entire surface
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 50
16 Releasing the hood 202
17 Opening the luggage compartment lid 31
7
Turn signals 64
High beams, headlamp flasher 94
Roadside parking lamps
* 94
Computer 69
Settings and information about the
vehicle 71
Instrument lighting 94
9
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor
* 65
10
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 55
Telephone
*:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing
* selected
phone numbers. Redialing if
no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system
* 22
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
MDrive
*, calling up individual
settings 50
Recirculated-air mode 98
15
Cruise control 66
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 68
5 Shift Lights
* 62
6 Engine oil temperature 69
7 Display for
> Clock 68
> Outside temperature 68
> Indicator and warning lamps 76
> With dual clutch transmission:
Computer 69
8 Display for
> Gear display M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic
* 58
> With manual transmission:
Computer 69
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 72
> Odometer and trip odometer 68
> Checking oil level 203
> Settings and information 71
> There is a Check Control
message 76
9 Fuel gauge 69
10 Resetting the trip odometer 68
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the top edge of the Control
Display describe the meanings of the indicator
and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 76.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Parking lamps/low beams 92
High beams/headlamp flasher 94
Parking brake applied 57
MDrive
* 50
M Dynamic Mode
* 82
Lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive forces in
order to maintain driving stability 82
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on exhaust emissions 208
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust
emissions 208
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for voice activation system*
and for telephone in hands-free mode*
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
* 221
3 Reading lamps 95
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric
* 37
5 Interior lamps 94
6 Passenger airbag status lamp
* 89
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Flat Tire Monitor FTM
* 84
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
* 85
10 Central locking system 30
11 Automatic climate control
12 CD/DVD drive 146
13 Changing the audio and entertainment
sources
14 Selecting AM or FM waveband
15 Changing
> Radio station 149
> Track 154
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
21 Electronic Damper Control EDC
* 83
22 M Engine Dynamics Control POWER 64
23 Programmable memory keys 20
24 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust-
ing volume 146
25 Ejecting CD/DVD 146
Air distribution to the
windshield 97
Air distribution to the upper body
area 97
Air distribution to the footwell 97
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 97
Cooling function 99
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC 98
Recirculated-air mode 98
Maximum cooling 97
Residual heat mode 98
Air flow rate 98
Defrosting windows 99
Rear window defroster 99
16
Heated seats
* 46
Coupe:
Roller sun blind
* 104
19
Convertible:
Opening and closing retractable
hardtop 39
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-
vidual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrow 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Buttons on the controller
Operating principle
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 55, the following message is dis-
played on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"Settings"
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Button Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Entertainment menu
NAV Open the Navigation menu
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Display the previous menu
OPTION Open the Options menu
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Open the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or set-
tings can be selected that are currently not vis-
ible.<
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
1 Time
2 Display for:
> Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS
* received
3 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV
*
> Telephone*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4 Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins
*:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system
*.
Switching the Control Display
off/on
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off display"
Press the controller to switch on.
Split screen
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g. information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Selecting the display for the split
screen content
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
iDrive
20
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.
Programmable memory keys
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory keys and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
Storing functions
1. Select the function via iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Example for programmable memory
keys
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. ... Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
... Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
Displaying brief information
... Touch the button.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Displaying detailed information
... Press the button for an
extended period.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
Town/city names can be entered with the spell-
ing used in any of the languages available on the
Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete one letter
or number
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not neces-
sary to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
Coupe: the voice activation system uses a spe-
cial microphone located in the area of the inte-
rior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Convertible: the voice activation system uses a
special microphone located in the area of the
steering column.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice activation system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 79.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spo-
ken commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis-
play.
To have the available commands read aloud:
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com-
mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 232.
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbrevi-
ated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. To select the setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. This also
applies when spelling out and saying a full
word during destination entry.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
{Voice commands}
{Radio on} or {Radio}
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{CD track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient
access
*, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 35.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile below.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 207.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 104
> Driver's door, refer to page 30
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if convenient access
* is
in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 20
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 27
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi-
tion after unlocking, refer to page 46
> Programming buttons on the steering
wheel, refer to page 50
> MDrive
*, refer to page 50
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
27
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Calling up the preferred program of the M
Engine Dynamics Control POWER and
Electronic Damper Control EDC
* when
starting the vehicle, refer to Configuring
settings on page 50
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 64
> Settings for the displays on the Control Dis-
play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 75
> Date format, refer to page 76
> Brightness of Control Display, refer to
page 79
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79
> Units of measure, refer to page 71
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC
*, refer to page 81
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 92
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 93
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 93
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated-air control, set-
ting temperature, air flow rate and distribu-
tion, refer to page 97 ff
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 146
> Tone control, refer to page 146
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 147
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
> Convertible: glove compartment
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
*
> In cars with convenient access*, via the
handles on the driver's and front passen-
ger's doors
In addition, if the remote control is used, the
welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's
courtesy lamps
* are switched on or off. The
alarm system
* is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system,
refer to
page 32.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable
hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and luggage compartment lid must be
closed and the cargo bay partition must be
folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer
also to page 39.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
* and the
welcome lamps come on.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Comfort opening", refer to page 28
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows and the glass roof
* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the
vehicle, you can open the retractable hardtop
using the remote control for convenient access.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the retractable hardtop are
opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win-
dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Convertible: convenient closing*
Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the
vehicle, you can close the retractable hardtop
and the windows using the remote control for
convenient access.
Hold the button down.
The retractable hardtop and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings
backwards and up when opened. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance. To avoid lock-
ing yourself out by accident, do not place the
remote control in the cargo bay. A previously
locked luggage compartment lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the lug-
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-
ently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading*
Within a range of approx. 13ft/4m from the vehi-
cle you can use the remote control to half close
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
the retractable hardtop when it is open to ease
loading of the cargo bay.
1. Briefly press the button and, within one
second, press again and hold until the
retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate
position. The luggage compartment lid
opens slightly.
2. Open the luggage compartment lid, press
the cargo bay partition upward and stow the
cargo in the cargo bay.
3. Press down the cargo bay partition until it
engages on both sides and close the lug-
gage compartment lid.
4. Press the button for a longer period to
fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Setting confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock./unlock."
4. Press the controller.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi-
cle is switched on.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system
* or
convenient access
*, only the driver's door can
be locked and unlocked with the integrated key
via the door lock.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the
remote control is interrupted briefly, the move-
ment will be completed more quickly if you keep
the corresponding button pressed continu-
ously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 26. The remote control for convenient
access
* contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 35.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 27.
Coupe
In vehicles without an alarm system* or
convenient access
*, only the driver's
door can be locked via the door lock.<
To lock all doors, the fuel filler door and the lug-
gage compartment lid at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking sys-
tem in the interior, refer to page 30.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas-
senger's door, refer to page 31.
3. Lock the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door via the door lock
using the integrated key, or
> push down the locking knob on the front
passenger's door and close the door
from the outside.
Convenient operation
Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system
* or convenience access*, you can also
operate the windows and the glass roof
* via the
door lock.
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
the retractable hardtop via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-
tion.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid when the doors
are closed, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks the
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
vehicle after a brief time if no door has
been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle when you drive away.
Automatic locking is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid
opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control for a longer period. The lug-
gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can
now be swung upwards.
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.<
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and
cannot be unlocked using the central locking
system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the luggage compart-
ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan-
tage when valet parking, for example. Locking
the glove compartment, refer to page 104.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
Coupe
Convertible
To close the luggage compartment lid,
press it down lightly. The lid is closed
automatically.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-
partment lid is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 33
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there is an interruption in the power
supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid
using the button of the remote control even
if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 28.
The lid is locked and monitored again as soon
as it is closed.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 27.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed
*.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys-
tem is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unin-
tentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without needing to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
separately
> Starting the engine
> Convenient closing
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked when the vehicle detects
that the remote control currently in use is
outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above. You should therefore first
familiarize yourself with the instructions on
opening and closing starting on page 26.
Special features regarding the use of conve-
nient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or retract-
able hardtop, the system is checking whether a
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
For convenient closing, refer to page, touch the
surface continuously, arrow 2.
For convenient closing, refer to page 30, touch
the surface continuously, arrow 2.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage
compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen.
The hazard warning flashers flash and an
acoustic signal
* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 55.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition lock, refer to page 55.
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this happens, open or close
the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con-
trol or using the integrated key. To start the
engine afterward, insert the remote control into
the ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 26.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not
close automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
Convenient operation
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27
or 30. For information on closing with conve-
nient access, refer to Locking on page 28.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels
into the raised position. The sliding visor
remains open.
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 27
or 30.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 213.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
* supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 213, into the
opening provided. Move the glass roof in
the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable
hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle
interior against unanticipated weather dam-
age, it also offers theft protection. However,
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables
should only be stored in the locked cargo
bay.
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the luggage
compartment lid, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated,
the luggage compartment lid swings back
and up. Before operating the retractable
hardtop, ensure that there is enough clear-
ance, e.g. when parked in front of a wall.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g.
after driving in the rain, water may drip into
the cargo bay. If necessary, remove items
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid
water stains or soiling.
Do not place any objects on the retract-
able hardtop or on the luggage compart-
ment lid, otherwise they could fall during move-
ments of the retractable hardtop and cause
damage or injury.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the
rollover protection system is in the activated
position.
Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed may result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism while the
hardtop is opening or closing. Keep children
away from the swiveling area of the retractable
hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved
at temperatures below +147/–106. A
message appears on the Control Display.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not
drive off until the hardtop has stopped mov-
ing.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded
down and engaged on both sides, refer to
page 108, otherwise it will not be possible
to open the retractable hardtop.
> Do not place any objects next to or on the
cargo bay partition and close the storage
compartment on the left side of the cargo
bay.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height
under the cargo bay partition; refer to the
label in the cargo bay showing a line indicat-
ing the maximum height.
> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is
closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level
ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a
lamp.
Opening and closing
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio
readiness or beyond, refer to page 55:
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running.
Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
1 Push button: open the retractable hardtop.
Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2 LEDs
The side windows move down when the
switch for hardtop operation is pulled or
pushed.<
LEDs
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left
LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as
the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the switch, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the
switch is pressed, the cargo bay partition is
folded up, the luggage compartment lid is
not closed, the vehicle is standing on a
strong incline or there is a malfunction. The
retractable hardtop cannot be moved.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the
switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or
closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce-
dure several times in close succession as this
could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed, the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened and the windows cannot be
moved.<
Convenient operation with remote
control or via door lock
Refer to pages 28 and 30.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the hardtop is open and provides an even more
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective
cover in the cargo bay. Brief instructions for
operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the
opening provided on the right side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the
protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the
opening provided on the left side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the
right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the
left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the
range between the two symbols, other-
wise the cable system inside the wind deflector
could be damaged.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for
the holders of the wind deflector.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Loading function
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the
vehicle even if the wind deflector has been
installed.
1. Lower all windows.
2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.
3. Turn the rotary handle to position ,
arrow 2.
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward
and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag
holders, you can fold the rear backrest down,
refer to page 109.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
42
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 53.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard,
otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbags, other-
wise serious injuries could result if the airbags
suddenly deployed.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 88.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 44.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 47.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 44, and on damaged safety
belts on page 48.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
44
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/
behind
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end
2 of the switch.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the
active head restraint reduces the distance to
the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
that could impair the function of the active
head restraint. Otherwise, the protective func-
tion of the active head restraint will not be
ensured and its full potential in reducing the risk
of injury in the event of a rear collision may not
be realized.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the active head restraints, have the
testing, repair and removal executed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to repair procedures of BMW with corre-
spondingly trained personnel and that has the
required explosives licenses. Unprofessional
attempts to work on the system could lead to
failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag
activation, either of which could result in per-
sonal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint
cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To lower: press the button downward.
Adjusting the distance to the back of
the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and push the head
cushion toward the rear.
Do not insert objects behind the head
cushion; otherwise, the head restraint
may not function properly.<
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Only remove the head restraints if no pas-
sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers
in the rear.<
Entering the rear seats
Coupe
Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp:
Comes on when a seat backrest is not
engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a mem-
ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise
there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected
movement.<
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 55.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Call-up
Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-
ment could result in an accident.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convenience mode
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 55.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 55.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The function for automatically calling up
the last seat position is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching off automatic call-up
Deactivate "Last seat position automatic"
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 42.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front
seats
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph
or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is
not fastened, if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child-
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to
fasten your safety belt. When you close the
door and switch on radio readiness or the igni-
tion, the belt hand-over extends automatically
and presents the safety belt in a position that is
convenient for fastening it around you. After
you have fastened your safety belt, the belt
hand-over retracts to its original position.
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety
belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start to drive.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt
hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger's seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is
occupied and after the front passenger's door is
closed.
Pinch protection system
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on
moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the
opposite direction and stops in this position. To
reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close
the door or switch the ignition off and on.
Although there is a pinch protection sys-
tem, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it
cannot be ensured that the system will stop
moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors manually or
with button 3 to prevent them from being dam-
aged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or transmission posi-
tion R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior and exterior mirrors*,
automatic dimming feature
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
* is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
MDrive*
With MDrive you can configure several individ-
ual settings for your vehicle on the Control Dis-
play and activate them using the button on
the steering wheel.
Configuring settings
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
The functions contained in MDrive are dis-
played:
> "Drivelogic:"
M dual clutch transmission with Drivel-
ogic: shift modes and Drivelogic drive
programs, refer to page 61
> "EDC:"
Electronic Damper Control EDC
* pro-
grams, refer to page 83
> "DSC:"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 82
> "POWER:"
M Engine Dynamics Control programs,
refer to page 64
> "Servotronic:"
Servotronic programs, refer to page 87
> "Shift lights:"
Shift Lights, refer to page 62
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select the desired function.
4. Select the desired setting.
"Unchanged" retains the current setting
made outside of MDrive.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating the settings
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. The settings made
on the Control Display for the functions
in MDrive are active.
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after the but-
ton was pressed, MDrive was unable to
respond because the Antilock Brake System
ABS or Dynamic Stability Control DSC are cur-
rently regulating driving stability. Press the
button again when the indicator lamp is no
longer flashing.<
You can change individual settings outside of
MDrive even when MDrive is activated, e.g.
using the buttons on the center console. To
reactivate all settings made on the Control Dis-
play for MDrive: press the button twice.
Resetting the settings
You can reset all MDrive settings to their default
values:
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is selected.
4. "Reset"
5. "Yes"
M Key settings
For the remote control currently in use, you can
set your preferred program for the M Engine
Dynamics Control, the Electronic Damper Con-
trol EDC and the Shift Lights. These preset-
tings are called up when the engine is started.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is selected.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
The available functions are displayed:
> "POWER:"
M Engine Dynamics Control programs,
refer to page 64
> "EDC:"
Electronic Damper Control
* programs,
refer to page 83
> "Shift lights:"
Shift Lights, refer to page 62
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 89.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Observe the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin-
ished.<
Standard child-restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passen-
ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after install-
ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-
ited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 44.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Coupe: child-restraint system with
tether strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
For child-restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Coupe: placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise the strap will not properly secure the child-
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys-
tem
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock under special circumstances, refer to
page 34.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the clutch is
depressed, the engine starts.
M dual clutch transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the brake is depressed,
the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access
*, by touch-
ing the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 34
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
56
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
To stop the starting procedure: press the start/
stop button again.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 34.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button.
The engine starts with the selector level in any
position. Driving off: with the engine running,
move the selector level from the middle position
Β in the desired direction.
Every time you start the engine, sequential
mode is activated in program S3 if you lightly
press the selector lever to the right to position
D/S with the brake pedal depressed.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, forcefully apply the parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Press the start/stop button.
If N is engaged when you switch off the
engine, you are notified visually and acous-
tically.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 55. This automati-
cally engages transmission position P.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when you perform the
following steps:
1. Insert the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
Transmission position P is engaged:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> When you remove the remote control from
the ignition lock
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
58
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic*
The concept
The M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic
is an automated manual transmission with two
clutches and a partial transmission in which an
electro-hydraulic system takes over clutch
action and shifting.
With the M dual clutch transmission, gears are
changed without interruption of the traction
force.
The M dual clutch transmission is operated
using the selector lever and two shift paddles
on the steering wheel.
The transmission offers you the following func-
tions:
> Selection between manual or automatic
operation, sequential mode or drive mode
> Selection between different drive pro-
grams, Drivelogic, refer to page 61
> Shift Lights, refer to page 62
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against selecting the wrong gear even in
sequential mode
> Launch Control, refer to page 63
> Automatic throttle blip
> Low Speed Assistant
System limitations
The M dual clutch transmission is equipped
with an overheating protection system that pro-
tects the clutch against extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow
when the transmission becomes too
warm. Avoid high engine loads and
driving off frequently. When the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up red and
the fuel supply to the engine is cut off. You can-
not continue driving until the transmission has
cooled down.
Avoid driving off frequently with high accelera-
tion and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
In traffic congestion or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to the informa-
tion below.
Low Speed Assistant
The Low Speed Assistant supports you when
driving at very low speeds: the vehicle moves at
walking speed and automatically controls the
engine speed. You can also use the Low Speed
Assistant when rocking the vehicle out of deep
snow. To do so, shift between reverse gear and
the forward position without pressing the brake.
Activating
1. Engage a drive position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator.
The vehicle rolls at the minimum speed.
Do not press the brake continuously as
this may cause the transmission to over-
heat.<
Deactivating
Brake the vehicle to a stop to deactivate the
Low Speed Assistant.
Selector lever positions
> R: reverse gear
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Β: middle position
> N: neutral
> +: shift up manually
> –: shift down manually
> D/S: change between drive mode and
sequential mode
Push or pull the selector lever in the required
direction to engage the desired transmission
position.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position. The selector lever locks in
position R.
The transmission position currently engaged is
indicated in the instrument cluster and by LEDs
on the selector lever.
Shiftlock
When the vehicle is stationary, press the brake
pedal before shifting out of N, otherwise the
desired gear will not be engaged.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
If the driving situation demands, e.g. when
downshifting on a slippery road, the M dual
clutch transmission automatically disengages
and engages the clutch.
N engages when you open the driver's
door while the engine is running, your
safety belt is not fastened and you activate nei-
ther the brake pedal nor the accelerator. To
drive off after closing the driver's door and fas-
tening your safety belt, move the selector lever
to position N first and then to the desired drive
position.<
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off if you leave the remote
control in the ignition lock. This function can be
used in an automatic car wash, for example,
refer to page 57.<
S sequential mode
Shift up or down using the shift paddles or the
selector lever. You do not need to lift your foot
off the accelerator when doing so.
Shift from sequential mode to drive mode:
press the selector lever to the right in the D/S
direction.
Shift back to sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or press the
selector level to the right in the D/S direction
again.
On a level road, you can drive off in second gear,
e.g. on slippery roads.
The M dual clutch transmission assists you in
the following situations:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle stops, the transmission
automatically shifts down to first gear.
> Shortly before the vehicle slows down to
below the minimum speed of the gear cur-
rently engaged, the transmission automati-
cally shifts down without requiring your
intervention.
Rapid downshifting: in sequential mode, you
can skip several gears to achieve optimal accel-
eration. To do so, press the accelerator past the
resistance point and pull the left shift paddle
once or press the selector lever forward once.
D drive mode
In drive mode, all forward gears are shifted auto-
matically.
Shift from drive mode to sequential mode: shift
using the shift paddles or the selector lever, or
press the selector level to the right in the D/S
direction.
Shift back to drive mode: press the selector
lever to the right in the D/S direction again.
Kick-down: to accelerate rapidly, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator down past the
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
60
resistance point. This provides maximum accel-
eration.
P Park
P engages automatically when you switch
off the engine unless N is engaged and
the remote control remains in the ignition lock,
refer to page 55. As soon as you remove the
remote control from the ignition lock, P
engages regardless of the position of the selec-
tor lever.<
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Engaged gear 1 to 7, R, N, P
2 Selected drive program,
corresponds to the number of illuminated
fields, refer to Drivelogic, page 61
3 The gear currently engaged is displayed
together with a D in drive mode
At very low outside temperatures, this display
may not be functional. The engaged driving
direction is indicated by the LEDs on the selec-
tor lever.
Changing gears
Via the selector lever
> To shift up, pull back the selector lever.
> To shift down, push it forward.
Via the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
> To shift up, pull the right-hand shift paddle
+ briefly.
> To shift down, pull the left-hand shift paddle
– briefly.
Unlocking the transmission lock
manually
If a power failure occurs, e.g. if the battery
is discharged or disconnected, the trans-
mission lock must be released manually, other-
wise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehi-
cle cannot be towed.<
Release the transmission lock manually for tow-
ing only and forcefully apply the parking brake
beforehand to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission
lock again.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Push the black cover forward using the
screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer
to page 213.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever, arrow 1.
5. Pull the screwdriver back all the way, arrow
2. The transmission lock is released.
6. Carefully remove the screwdriver, for exam-
ple to avoid accidentally engaging the
transmission lock during towing.
After parking the vehicle, lock the trans-
mission lock again. Otherwise there is a
danger of the vehicle rolling.<
Locking
1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever and press forward.
The transmission lock is locked again.
2. Fold back the black cover until it engages
audibly.
3. Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back
into place.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 223.
Drivelogic
Various drive programs are available to you via
Drivelogic.
After every change between sequential and
drive mode, the program selected last in each
case is active. Exception: after the first change
from sequential to drive mode, drive program 3
is active.
In drive mode
Five drive programs are available for selection,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporting and
highly dynamic 5.
In sequential mode
You can choose between six drive programs,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporty
puristic 6.
Program 6 is available when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated, refer to page 82. If DSC
is activated, the program changes from 6 to 5.
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
Selecting the drive program via the
button in the center console
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
drive program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 60.
Selecting the drive program via the
button on the steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred drive pro-
gram via the button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 50.
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
62
3. Select "Drivelogic:".
4. Turn the controller to set the drive mode or
sequential mode.
"Unchanged" retains the current settings
made outside of MDrive.
5. Press the controller to select the drive pro-
grams.
6. Turn the controller to set the drive program.
7. Press the controller.
Shift Lights
To achieve the best possible acceleration in
sequential mode when using a sporty driving
style, the Shift Lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the best shift point just before the max-
imum engine speed is reached.
1. As the vehicle approaches its maximum
engine speed, the yellow LEDs 1 light up
consecutively to indicate the impending
shift point.
2. At the latest, shift when the red LEDs 2 light
up.
The LEDs flash when the maximum allowable
engine speed is reached. When the maximum
engine speed is exceeded, the fuel supply is cut
off to protect the engine. Avoid engine speeds
in this range at all costs.
Switching the Shift Lights on/off
For operating principle, refer to page 71.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display accompanied by
the word "SET".
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to select:
>
Shift Lights activated.
>
Shift Lights deactivated.
5. Press button 2.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the status set for the remote con-
trol in use is active, refer to M Key settings on
page 51.
You can set and call up the preferred status
of the Shift Lights via the MDrive, refer to
page 50.
Brightness of Shift Lights
The brightness of the Shift Lights can be set
using the brightness level of the instrument
cluster, refer to Instrument lighting on page 94.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables you to drive off with an
optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road
surface.
Do not use Launch Control too often, as
the higher loads on the vehicle lead to
premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving con-
tinuously for at least 6 miles/10 km.
1. Press the brake while the engine is running.
2. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC,
refer to page 83.
3. Select sequential mode with Drivelogic
drive program 6.
4. With the vehicle stationary, press the selec-
tor lever forward and hold. A flag symbol
appears in the instrument cluster.
5. Press the accelerator down all the way. The
engine speed when driving off is controlled.
6. If you wish, you can adjust the drive-off
engine speed by up to approx. 500 rpm:
> Increase the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: press the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 1.
> Decrease the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: pull the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 2.
> Reset the drive-off engine speed: press
the lever upward or downward, arrows 3.
7. The vehicle accelerates when you release
the selector lever. Keep the accelerator
pressed all the way down.
8. The transmission shifts up automatically as
long as the accelerator is pressed all the
way down.
Launch Control only becomes available again
after a certain distance has been driven.
Do not use Launch Control during the vehicle
break-in period, refer to page 116.
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
64
M Engine Dynamics Control
With M Engine Dynamics Control you can influ-
ence how sportily your vehicle should respond
to movements of the accelerator. Three pro-
grams are available to you.
"Normal" program
In the "Normal" program, the engine responds
gently to accelerator movements, which is ideal
for city traffic or on snow, for example.
"Sport" program
The "Sport" program provides for a more spon-
taneous response of the engine to accelerator
movements.
"Sport Plus" program
In the "Sport Plus" program, the engine
responds to accelerator movements with high
spontaneity and uncompromising sportiness.
The "Sport Plus" program can only be activated
via MDrive, refer to MDrive on page 50.
Selecting a program
Press the POWER button to switch between
the "Normal" and "Sport" programs.
For the programs "Sport" and "Sport Plus", the
LED in the POWER button lights up.
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 50.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the program set for the remote
control in use is active, refer to M Key settings
on page 51.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Triple turn signal"
Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving
66
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster. This function is
not available when DSC is switched off.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If engine braking power is
insufficient on a downhill grade, the stored
speed may be exceeded.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed lightly to the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerate slightly, increase speed steadily:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate strongly, increase speed in intervals
of 10:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you shift or depress the clutch
> When you deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
When the ignition is switched off, the stored
speed value is cleared and can no longer be
called up.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
68
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock, refer to
Computer on page 69
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 71.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 74.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above Select the symbol. +377/+36.
You should therefore drive carefully on bridges
and shaded roads, for example, otherwise there
is an increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
The prewarning field, arrow 1, and the red warn-
ing field, arrow 2, change in relation to the
engine temperature. The permissible engine
speed increases with increased engine temper-
ature. Avoid engine speeds in the prewarning
field, if possible.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Never drive at engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the engine speed is limited to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi-
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis-
play.
Check coolant level, refer to page 206.
Engine oil temperature
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 1757/806 and approx. 2507/
1206.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/
63 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 194.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis-
play.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Oil level, refer to Checking oil level on
page 203
> Average fuel consumption
> Speed
> No information
M dual clutch transmission:
Outside temperature, time, cruising
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
70
range, oil level, average fuel consumption and
speed appear in the top display.<
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for
another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if:
> A distance was manually entered into
the computer, refer to information
below.
> A destination was entered in the naviga-
tion system
*, refer to page 127.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Resetting the Trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. Select
> "Reset" all values are reset
> "Automatically reset" all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the engine is
switched off
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 69
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 94
4 Calling up Check Control 76
5 Setting the time 74
6 Setting the date 75
7 Viewing service requirement display 72
8 Switching Shift Lights
* on/off 62
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up detailed information about the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 75, otherwise the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 207.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Date below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. "Format:"
5. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to "Format:" below.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. A Check Control message
involves the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster, an acoustic signal if applica-
ble, and text messages on the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can view the Check Control
messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Move the controller to the left.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur
at the same time, they are displayed in succes-
sion.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on.
It is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
After the warning, you are only alerted to reach-
ing this speed a second time if your vehicle
speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or
5km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit warning"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings on the Control
Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Warning signal volume
You can raise or lower the volume of the warn-
ing signals, e.g. the 'fasten safety belt'
reminder, relative to the entertainment sound
output. The warning signals have a fixed mini-
mum and maximum volume that cannot be
dropped below or exceeded.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol-
ume control
> "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone
relative to the entertainment sound out-
put
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.
for the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, rela-
tive to the entertainment sound output
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Central display"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visi-
ble.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. To measure the distance,
there are four ultrasonic sensors in the
bumpers.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec-
ond when you engage reverse gear. Wait this
short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds
> if you stop in front of an object that has been
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> if you are driving parallel to a wall.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-
tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis-
play before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out-
side or inside the car can drown out the PDC
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, oth-
erwise there is a risk of personal injury or prop-
erty damage.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 117.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assist
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC optimizes driving stability and traction. In
addition, the system recognizes unstable driv-
ing situations such as understeering and over-
steering, and helps keep the vehicle on a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
power and applying the brakes on individual
wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
M Dynamic Mode MDM*
M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the Dynamic
Stability Control DSC that permits greater lon-
gitudinal and lateral acceleration when driving
on dry surfaces, yet with reduced driving stabil-
ity. Only at the absolute limit of stability does
the system intervene to stabilize the vehicle by
reducing engine power and applying the brakes
on the wheels. In such situations, additional
corrective steering maneuvers may be neces-
sary.
M Dynamic Mode is switched off every time the
engine is restarted.
When the M Dynamic Mode is on, stabi-
lizing measures are performed to a limited
degree only. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
the DSC activated and the
MDynamicMode deactivated whenever possi-
ble.<
Activating MDM
Press the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive
* on page 50. The MDM indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if you
previously selected the M Dynamic Mode MDM
in MDrive.
When the ignition is on, you can set the
M Dynamic Mode via MDrive on the Control
Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "MDrive"
3. "DSC:"
4. Select "M Dynamic Mode".
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Deactivating MDM
Press the button on the steering wheel
again; the MDM indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp goes out briefly after
the engine is started.
If the indicator lamp lights up:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
The indicator lamp lights up perma-
nently and the DSC indicator lamp
flashes: M Dynamic Mode is control-
ling the drive and braking forces.
Deactivating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button for longer than
approx. 1 second; the indicator lamps for DSC
in the instrument cluster light up. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
You may find it useful to briefly deactivate DSC
under the following exceptional circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button again; the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive and brak-
ing forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
Electronic Damper Control
EDC*
The concept
Whenever there is a change in any significant
parameter such as road surface quality or in an
operating condition such as steering, braking,
etc., the damping automatically adjusts to the
new conditions in fractions of a second.
You can select between three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want com-
fort-oriented control of the shock absorbers.
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers control that is bal-
anced between comfort and sportiness.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consis-
tently sporty control of the shock absorbers.
Selecting a program
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off.
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
Each time the engine is started, the program set
for the remote control in use is active, refer to M
Key settings on page 51.
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 50.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum-
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. This change is detected
and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each
time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to Indi-
cation of a flat tire on page 85.
3. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is
moving, without any feedback.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
6. Start to drive.
The initialization is completed during the trip.
"Flat Tire Monitor active" is displayed again on
the Control Display.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify the damaged tire. To do so, check
the tire pressure using the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to Producing the tire inflation
pressure on page 219.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to page 218.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yel-
low. A message appears on the Con-
trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has
a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-
tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth-
erwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-
den severe tire damage caused by out-
side influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-
cated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics has been
mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunction-
ing due to other systems or devices using the
same radio frequency.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the wheels represents the status of
the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures
change while the vehicle is being driven. The
tire pressures do not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in several tires. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to
Message for low tire inflation pressure on
page 86.
The message "Resetting TPM..." appears
on the Control Display for several seconds.
3. Start to drive.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the
target values to be monitored. The system
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, the reset is continued automati-
cally. The indicator lamp goes out after the
system reset is completed.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be inter-
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the Control
Display, the tires are shown in green and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are
displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is
shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-
tify the damaged wheel on the vehicle.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to page 217.
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop that is informed in the handling of
TPM and that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the wheels are shown in gray and a message
appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has
been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. The system is not reset after a
tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 86.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Servotronic
The concept
"Servotronic" varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels as a function of the speed at
which you are driving.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
At low speeds, steering is assisted strongly, i.e.
less effort is required to turn the vehicle. Steer-
ing assistance lessens with increasing speed.
You can select between two programs
*.
"Normal" program
Select the "Normal" program if you want com-
fort-oriented steering, e.g. in city traffic or when
parking.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consis-
tently sporty steering.
Selecting a program
You can set and call up your preferred pro-
gram via MDrive, refer to page 50.
Brake force display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Head airbags
4 Side airbags in the seat backrests
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and windows on the front
passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments or
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 53.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accor-
dance with whether and how the front passen-
ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows
whether the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child-restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi-
cle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 55, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-
ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-
tem ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
Never move the retractable hardtop when
the rollover protection system is in the
activated position.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 72.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Lamps
92
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*, daytime run-
ning lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive
Head Light
*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 94.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap-
tive Head Light
* is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 93. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lamps to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Welcome light"
Welcome lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after park-
ing the car, with the lamps switched off, the low
beams and the rear lamps come on and remain
on for a certain time.
Setting or deactivating the duration
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set or deactivate the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps
The daytime running lamps light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Daytime running lamps are activated and
are stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 92.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are active and switched on on
both sides.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Lamps
94
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the brightness level and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry
lamps
*, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 55.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Climate
96
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 99
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/
Recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 26.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment
is deactivated.
The current setting is briefly displayed on the
Control Display when a button is pressed.
You can switch the automatic air distribution
back on by pressing the AUTO button. This
automatically switches on the cooling function
as well.
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures indi-
vidually for the driver's and front
passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
When you switch between different tem-
perature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have
enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
You can achieve maximum heating power with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recir-
culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow rate and your temperature specifications
will be adapted to outside influences as a result
of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window
condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the
intensity of the AUTO program. The current
setting is displayed on the Control Display
when the button is pressed.
Select the intensity of the AUTO program:
> Low
> Medium
> High
Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the
hardtop is open and the AUTO program is
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Climate
98
switched on. In the Convertible program, the
automatic air conditioning system is optimized
for driving with the top open. In addition, the air
flow rate is increased as vehicle speed
increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible pro-
gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce airflow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode for the
air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the auto-
matic climate control. All displays are cleared
except for the rear window defroster if it is
switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate
control.
The recirculated-air mode is switched on
when you switch off the automatic cli-
mate control. If the air quality deteriorates or the
window fogs over, switch the system back on
and increase the air volume.<
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-
essary, the system blocks the supply of out-
side air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the
quality of the air inside the car will gradually
deteriorate.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated-air mode and the previous mode using an
individually programmable button
on the steer-
ing wheel, refer to page 50.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> While the engine is at operating tempera-
ture
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 77 7/
25 6
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-
bution.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available while the engine is
running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna
and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper-
ature
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open
and close the air vents
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
It is ready for use at any outside temperature
during parked car operation.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Climate
100
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on
times can be preselected. The system can also
be switched on and off directly.
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driv-
ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 102.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
102
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched off.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable
hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4mph or 7km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop
fully and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Coupe:
Roller sun blind*
Tap the button in the center console to raise or
lower the roller sun blind.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 26.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the
outside, the glove compartment is locked as
well.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 164.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter
*, depending on the equip-
ment version. For more information about this
mobile phone base plate refer to the separate
Owner's Manual.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Settings*
Slide the center armrest into the desired posi-
tion on the driver's side.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 165
> USB-audio interface
*, refer to page 166
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering col-
umn
*, in the front doors and in the center con-
sole
*.
There are nets
on the front-seat backrests.
Storage compartments in the rear
console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, the following storage compartments can
be found in the rear console:
> Storage tray
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
> Storage compartment with cover
> Cup holders
Coupe: clothes hooks
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other-
wise they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth-
erwise damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cup holder.
Rear*
There are two additional cup holders in the rear
console.
Press the button to open.
Before folding down the rear seat back-
rest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cup holder and close it. Do
not place objects into the cup holder and do not
use force to close it. Do not use the cup holder
as a grab handle.<
Ashtray, front
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Ashtray, rear
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 105.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
Coupe: socket in the cargo bay*
Open the cap.
Coupe:
Through-loading system
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi-
tion and engage it.
When returning the backrest into its seat-
ing position, make sure that the seat's
locking mechanism engages properly. Other-
wise, cargo could be thrown around in the event
of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets
* or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 119.
Convertible:
Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo bay
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the
cargo bay:
To do so, push the cargo bay partition upward.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo bay
partition down until it engages on both sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that
there are no objects on or next to the
cargo bay partition, otherwise parts of the hard-
top may be damaged. Do not exceed the maxi-
mum loading height; refer to the sticker in the
cargo bay showing a line indicating the maxi-
mum height. Do not use force to push down the
cargo bay partition.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened if the cargo bay partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both
sides.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Folding down the rear seat backrest
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to
transport light objects in the rear without dam-
aging the seats. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the mounting points for the cargo
bay net
* are found on the back of the seat back-
rest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the
button on the driver's or the opposite side.
Bag holder*
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you
will find two bag holders on the cargo bay wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the but-
ton.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the
holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other
suitable objects from the holders, other-
wise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead
to a safety hazard due to objects flying about
the passenger compartment. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been
appropriately secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle,
refer to page 118.
Storage compartment behind the rear
seat backrest
A storage compartment is located behind the
rear seat backrest. To access the storage com-
partment: remove the insert or fold down the
rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded
down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage
compartment, otherwise braking maneuvers
and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to
objects flying about the passenger compart-
ment. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo bay
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-
ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-
sion
> Net
* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g. shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
Convertible
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the
cargo bay. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net
* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Rubber strap
* for subdividing the cargo
bay; can be hooked onto the lateral lashing
eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam-
age could result.<
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the
catch.
Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the open-
ing at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 119.
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/
2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
1. Take out the filler piece.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap
into the eyelet.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag*
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you
can remove the insert and use the transport bag
with the regular through-loading opening. To
transport larger objects, you can fold down the
rear seat backrest to create an expanded
through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a
length of up to 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m. When skis of 6 ft
2 in/1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capac-
ity of the transport bag is reduced due to its
tapered design.
Loading
1. For loading using the regular through-load-
ing opening:
Press the button down and remove the
insert from the front.
For loading with the through-loading open-
ing expanded:
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 109.
2. Front cover: press the two recesses
together and fold the cover down until it
engages.
3. In the cargo bay: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out
the transport bag between the front seats.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap
into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases
access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap
sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport
bag if you do not need its full length.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the front cover
You can remove the front cover to use the full
height of the through-loading opening. With the
cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow,
and remove the cover toward the front. To
replace, insert the cover at an angle from above
and let it snap it into place.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
116
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 5,500 rpm and a
road speed of 105 mph/170 km/h.
Do not depress the accelerator all the way.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
Engine and road speeds can be increased grad-
ually up to a traveling speed of 135 mph/
220 km/h. Use the maximum speed only for
brief intervals, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The transmission begins functioning at an opti-
mal level only after a distance of approx.
300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed engine
speeds of 5,500 rpm during this period.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Clearance
Mind the limited clearance of the BMW
M3, e.g. when driving into underground
parking garages or over obstacles. If equipped
with EDC
*, select the "Sport" program, refer to
page 83, when driving off curbs to keep clear-
ance as even as possible. Otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged.<
Close the luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid is closed. Other-
wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of
the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage
compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 98.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
117
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes, e.g.
when loading the cargo bay, otherwise there is a
risk of burn injuries.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 199.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 84.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system.
M dual clutch transmission: never drive
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine
braking action will not be present or there will be
no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
engine braking action will not be present or
there will be no power assistance to the brakes
or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
118
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
This can also lead to a permanent loss in ride
comfort and to squealing noises during braking.
A loss in comfort can also be caused by
extended braking with little pressure on the
pedal.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
For information on brake system technology,
refer to Compound brake on page 121.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately
result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Coupe
Convertible
Securing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
Convertible: before opening the hardtop,
fold down the cargo bay partition. Make
sure the cargo bay is loaded correctly, other-
wise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer
to page 108.<
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo bay net
* or draw
straps
*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are
provided for attaching the cargo straps.
Two are located on the cargo bay
sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo
bay panel 2.
Please comply with the information sup-
plied with the cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 231, as excessive loads can pose a
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
120
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 54, otherwise these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack*
A luggage rack mounted on the roof
changes vehicle aerodynamics and han-
dling. Exercise restraint when driving with a
roof-mounted luggage rack to avoid the risk of
an accident.<
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 231.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-
ing the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the luggage
compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid taking corners rapidly
and sudden acceleration and braking maneu-
vers.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW M3 engineering
High performance V8 engine
The high-revving V8 engine draws a maximum
power of 420 hp/309 kW and a peak torque of
295 lb ft/400 Nm from a displacement of
244 cu in/4 liters. Its spontaneous response
results in a very wide effective rpm range. The
maximum engine speed lies at 8,400 rpm and is
electronically controlled. Due to the high engine
dynamics, the maximum engine speed is lim-
ited to 7,000 rpm when the vehicle is standing.
Warming up the engine
During the warm-up phase, the high-perfor-
mance V8 engine runs a little more roughly due
to its emissions control system.
For technical reasons, the exhaust system
sounds slightly metallic when the engine is
cold.
For further information on warming up the
engine, refer to Tachometer on page 68 and
Engine oil temperature on page 69.
Compound brake
Your BMW M3 is equipped with a high-perfor-
mance brake system with perforated com-
pound brake discs.
Due to special design features of the perforated
compound brake discs, operating noise is audi-
ble during braking. However, this does not
affect the brake's performance, safe operation
or stability under load.
Braking correctly
To keep the brake system in optimal condition,
it is advisable to apply the brakes at regular
intervals as appropriate for the character of the
vehicle.
Refer also to Corrosion on brake rotors on
page 117.
Drive train
In your BMW M3, special emphasis was placed
on the direct connection between the engine
and drive. The torsionally rigid execution of the
drive train results in acoustic feedback of the
torque, as is typical in sports cars. Clacking
sounds can arise during load changes. They do
not impair functionality or shorten the lifespan
of any component.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
BMW M3 engineering
122
Driving on a race track
BMW recommends the following measures
before driving on a race track:
> Participate in a BMW driver training course
> Have the vehicle checked by your BMW
center
Operation on race tracks results in a
higher rate of wear. The BMW M3 is not
designed for use in competitive motorsports.
This wear is not covered by the vehicle war-
ranty.<
The series brake pads and wear indicator are
not designed for operation on a race track. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation system
126
Navigation system
General information
With the help of satellites, the navigation sys-
tem is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti-
nation you enter.
The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and
can be updated using navigation DVDs.
Make all entries while the vehicle is sta-
tionary
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary,
and always give priority to the applicable traffic
regulations in the event of any contradiction
between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.<
Updating the navigation data
The navigation data is stored in the vehicle and
can be updated using a navigation DVD. Please
contact the BMW center if you have any ques-
tions.
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Displaying information on the version
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version". Information
on the data version is displayed.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
*
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 129
> Last destinations, refer to Last destinations,
page 130
> Special destinations, refer to page 130
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 132
> Selecting home address, refer to page 130
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 133
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. This allows you to enter different spell-
ings and completes your entry automatically so
that stored names can be called up quickly.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
locality if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the dis-
played town/city, or select letters.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
2. Move the controller to the right.
3. Select the name of the town/city from the
list. The three destinations stored last are
displayed.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Zip Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code. A preview map is
displayed in the assistance window.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the specified state/province are
offered. The corresponding town/city is dis-
played after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. "Find streets in" the state/province cur-
rently displayed.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street. A preview map is dis-
played in the assistance window.
9. Select the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Selection after destination entry
> "Start guidance".
Destination guidance is started immedi-
ately.
> "Route preference"
refer to page 137.
> "Points of Interest at dest."
refer to page 130.
If a new town/city is selected during destination
guidance, the current destination guidance is
terminated.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 183.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces-
sary, using "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. "Start guidance"
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in "My Contacts""
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in "My Contacts""
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 183.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home address"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for special destinations, e.g.
hotels and places of interest, and start destina-
tion guidance to this location.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. "Search destination"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.
3. "Route Points of Interest"*
Category details
Additional details can be displayed for some
special destinations, e.g. Italian restaurants.
1. "Points of Interest"
2. "Category details"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search" after the criteria have been
defined.
2. A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
> Special destinations "At current loca-
tion" are listed according to their dis-
tance from the current location and are
displayed with a directional arrow point-
ing to the destination.
> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map display as sym-
bols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
> Special destinations "At destination",
"At a different destination", "Along
route" are listed according to their dis-
tance from the location where the search
is being performed.
3. Highlight the special destination. The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol. Destination guid-
ance to the special destination is started.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Name, A-Z search"
2. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max-
imum of 100 entries.
3. Change to the list of special destinations.
4. Highlight the special destination. The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
5. Select the special destination.
6. Select the symbol to start destination
guidance.
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination via
the map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol. The interactive map
is started.
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> Turn the controller: change the scale.
> Move the controller in one direction:
move the map.
> First move the controller and turn it at
the same time: move the map diagonally
to select a destination in one of the four
regions.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items:
> Select the symbol: start destination
guidance.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street or town/
city, it displays a street name in the vicinity or
the coordinates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
> Select the symbol: start destination
guidance.
> "Exit interactive map"
> "View in northern direction"
> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 130.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice activation system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice activation system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Voice commands}.<
Entering an address
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for a par-
ticular part of the address.
5. Say the name of the destination state/prov-
ince in the language of the voice activation
system.
Entering a town/city
The destination town/city can be spelled or
entered as a complete word
*.
The methods of entry depend on the nav-
igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destinations
that meet your entries. Up to 7 entries at a time
appear on the Control Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the destina-
tion is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as a complete
word
The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
activation system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
2. {Enter address}
4. Say the particular part of the address,
e.g. {State}
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recog-
nize the town/city.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry ...}
> To re-enter the town/city: {New
entry}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
Example: to enter a destination in a state/prov-
ince as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and
avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
The system may suggest multiple destina-
tions that meet your entries.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a des-
tination followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
The destination is added to the destination list
and is displayed in the list of last destinations.
Trip planner
The trip planner can be used to plan a trip with
several legs to different destinations.
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate "Trip with several dest.".
4. "Trip list".
5. "New trip"
Entering intermediate destinations
1. "Enter first dest. in the trip", if applicable,
"Another destination in the trip"
2. "Enter address using:"
3. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted: "As first desti-
nation", "As last destination" or "Insert
within list".
5. If applicable, select "Another destination in
the trip".
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry ...}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell city}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Starting the trip
After entering all of the intermediate destina-
tions, open a stored trip directly via "Start guid-
ance" or via "Trip list".
Storing a trip
In the trip planner, created trips can be stored in
the trip list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list. This function is not
available for imported trips.
1. "Trip list"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Arranging the order of intermediate
destinations
This function is not available for imported trips.
1. "Trip entry"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
3. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
4. Move the intermediate destination to
another position in the list.
Deleting an intermediate destination
This function is not available for imported trips.
1. "Trip entry"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Trip list"
2. Select the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Opening the trip list
The stored trips are listed in alphabetical order
in the trip list.
1. "Trip planner"
2. "Yes"
3. "Trip list"
4. Select a trip.
Importing trips
A maximum of 30 trips with at most
50 intermediate destinations per trip can be
stored.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Trip planner"
3. "Yes"
4. "Trip list"
5. Highlight the trip.
6. Open "Options".
7. Select "Import trip".
8. "USB device" or "BMW Search"
*
9. "OK"
Terminating trip planning
To return to the direct entry of destinations:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Deactivate "Trip with several dest.".
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-
paring your destination entries with the data
stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant
response. The benefits for you include:
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or
unregistered names is impossible.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
After the route is calculated, the route is dis-
played in the map on the Control Display.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached at the end of
the last trip, the system asks whether it should
continue destination guidance.
Select "Resume guidance" or "Stop guidance".
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route,
which is a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads
> "Efficient route": optimized combination
of the fastest and shortest roads
> "Short route": short distance, irrespec-
tive of how fast or slow progress will be
> "Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways"
> "Avoid toll roads"
> "Avoid ferries"
> "Avoid area": define an area that the
route is to avoid
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
138
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
different views of the route are available during
destination guidance.
> Map display
> Arrow display
> Display of the streets and towns/cities on
the route.
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis-
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle-
tins are displayed for each route section.
> Display a list of the streets and towns/cities
on the route.
> Display the traffic bulletins and the driving
distance for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
A section of the route up to 32 miles/50 km in
length can be bypassed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num-
ber.
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed: "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendations
The vehicle calculates the range and recom-
mends several gas stations along the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol to start destination
guidance.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol
The voice instructions are switched on.
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 20.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map display
Map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map display:
1 Starting/stopping destination guidance
2 Switching voice instructions on/off
3 Changing route criteria or selecting route
alternatives
4 Special destinations
5 Displaying traffic bulletins
6 Interactive map
7 Settings for the map display
8 Changing scale
Information in the map display:
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
Viewing the map
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select a setting:
> "View facing north"
> "View in direction of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "Arrow display"
3. Press the controller.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map display facing north, turn the control-
ler in any direction until AUTO is displayed as
the map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map display
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
> Optimized view "Night mode"
> Optimized view with spatial display:
"Perspective view in 3D" prominent
areas are shown in the map.
Split screen settings
The map settings for the split screen can be
created separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
4. Press the controller.
5. Select the settings:
> "View facing north"
> "View in direction of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "3D exit ramps"*
6. To change the scale:
> Move the controller: change the scale.
Traffic bulletins*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes-
sage Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually via iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map dis-
play.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic bulle-
tins relevant to your planned route are automat-
ically shown. Whether destination guidance is
active or not, you can have the traffic informa-
tion displayed in the map view or in the traffic
info list.
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map display.
Opening the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
3. Select a traffic bulletin.
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Highlighting traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic Info map"
The map is optimized for displaying the traf-
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special desti-
nations are no longer displayed.
Symbols in the map display
The appearance of the symbols indicating a
traffic obstruction depends on the scale and the
position of the traffic obstruction relative to the
route.
> Smaller map scale, e.g. 1 mile/2 km: white
sign with the traffic obstruction symbol
> Larger map scale, e.g. 50 miles/100 km:
white sign with an arrow in the relevant
direction
Additional information in the map
display
When using a smaller map scale, the traffic
obstructions are displayed as gray bars at the
edge of the calculated route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the filter:
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa-
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, tak-
ing into consideration traffic obstructions and
road types.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
Selecting a detour
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select the traffic obstruction that is to be
taken into consideration.
4. "Detour"
Taking into consideration all traffic
obstructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
3. Select "Recommended detour".
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position. Try
again later.
> The destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not yet been fully recorded
> The system does not react to entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes up
to 15 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
On/off and tone
146
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
> Video
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
> Voice activation system
Buttons near the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Eject the CD
3 CD/DVD drive
4FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station.
> Select the track for CD player and CD
changer.
Switching on/off
In order to switch the entertainment sound out-
put on and off:
Press button 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
If equipped with a single drive, the sound output
is available for approx. 20 minutes after the igni-
tion is switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
Adjusting volume
Turn button 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Opening the tone settings
1. "Radio" or "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Tone"
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
1. Select the desired tone setting.
2. To adjust: turn the controller.
3. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "Equalizer"
2. Select the desired setting.
> To adjust: turn the controller.
> To store: press the controller.
Individual High-End Audio System* or
LOGIC7*
You can choose between stereo and surround.
"L7 Surround"
"Surround"
Multi-channel playback is simulated when play-
ing back an audio track in stereo.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
vated, depending on the audio track selected.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Volume
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control
> "Navigation"
*: voice instructions from the
navigation system
> "PDC"
*: volume of the PDC signal tone rel-
ative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the 'fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to
the entertainment sound output
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
On/off and tone
148
Adjustments
1. "Volume settings"
2. Select the desired volume setting.
3. To adjust: turn the controller.
4. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
"Reset"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Selecting a station
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Call up the desired station.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
or
Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
Frequency, selecting manually
In "Manual", you can set stations that can be
received in addition to those already being dis-
played.
1. "FM" or "AM"
2. "Manual"
3. Call up the frequency.
To store the station: press the controller.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "FM" or "AM"
2. Select the desired station.
3. Press the controller again.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Radio
150
4. Select the desired memory location.
The station is stored.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer also to page 20.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS
On the FM waveband, additional information is
broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. "FM"
2. Open "Options".
3. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital sig-
nals. You can receive these stations digitally for
improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "FM" or "AM"
2. Open "Options".
3. "HD radio"
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
1. Select a station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Stored stations
Storing a station
1. "Presets"
2. "Store station"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Select the desired memory location.
Deleting a station
1. Select a station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
152
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding pack-
ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
Enabling the channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Ensure that reception is reliable. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select the channel.
5. If the channel has not yet been enabled,
then a phone number and the ESN elec-
tronic serial number are displayed.
6. Call the phone number to have the channel
enabled.
The channels can be disabled again via this
phone number.
Disabling channels
The channels can be disabled by phone. To do
so, have the electronic serial number ESN
ready.
1. "Satellite radio".
2. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
3. Open "Options".
4. The electronic serial number is displayed.
5. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.
*
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a channel
Selecting a channel
1. "Satellite radio"
2. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
3. Select the desired channel.
Storing a channel
1. "Satellite radio"
2. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
3. "Store Channel".
4. Call up the desired memory location.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Displaying information about another
channel
Information about a track currently being played
on another channel can be displayed.
1. Highlight the channel on which you wish to
display information.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Channel info"
Changing the channel using the
buttons below the CD/DVD drive
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is
received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-
ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive a sig-
nal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
A signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to high-rise build-
ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other
strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig-
nal becomes available again.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
154
CD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in auto-
matically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. When playing CDs/DVDs with com-
pressed audio files, it can take the player
approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending
on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer
*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Start playback
Via iDrive
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to
page 159.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting a CD
Press the button next to the CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting a track
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
*
Symbol Function
CD/DVD player
CD changer
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs with compressed audio files*
Depending on the data, some letters and num-
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
1. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off if the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
156
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Start playback
The video image is displayed on the Control
Display up to a vehicle speed of approx. 2 mph/
3km/h.
In some country versions, playback is either not
possible at all or only possible with the parking
brake set.
DVD video
1. "CD/DVD"
2. Select a DVD with video content.
3. "DVD menu"
4. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/DVD"
2. Select a CD with video content.
3. "Select track"
4. Select the desired track.
The CD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
The Video menu is displayed:
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/Language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
*
Start playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
158
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select chapter"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2 seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD per compartment with the
labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take out
the CD.
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g. inconsistent data-
creation or recording processes, or poor quality
or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
160
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as
needed by wiping it with a commercially avail-
able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the
center of the disc outwards.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Storing music
Music tracks from CDs and DVDs can be stored
in the music collection in the vehicle and played
from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
The CD is stored in the vehicle as an album.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CDs with compressed audio files: the entire
CD is stored in the vehicle as an album.
After storing, the tracks and directories can
be deleted individually. Files are only stored
in the WMA, MP3, and AAC formats. Tracks
with DRM copy protection can be stored in
the vehicle but cannot be played back.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
1. Insert the CD into the CD player.
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track on the CD is played back. During the stor-
age process, the tracks are played in sequence.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD from the CD/DVD player, as this
will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter-
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD that have already been stored can
be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/DVD"
2. "Storing..."
3. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
"Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
If no information is stored with the tracks, you
can update the entire album information via
BMW Search
*, refer to page 186.
Gracenote® technology
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is
the industry standard in music recognition
technology and related content delivery. For
more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Music collection
162
Storing from a USB device
The entire content of the USB device is stored
in the music collection as an album. After stor-
ing, the tracks and directories can be deleted
individually.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music import/export"
5. "Import music (USB)"
Music is stored in the vehicle. The entire con-
tent of the USB device is stored as a separate
album and is named automatically.
Music, playing
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
All entries are displayed in a list.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain art-
ist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by
that artist are then displayed.
"Start play"
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "Top 50"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
> Audio CD
> Compressed audio files
Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the sub-
directories of the album are displayed. The first
track is played automatically, if possible.
To select tracks, change directories if needed.
To go up one level in the directory, move the
controller to the left.
Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown it can be changed later if
needed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. Highlight the album.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
1. Highlight the directory or track.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Album information*
If audio CDs are stored without information, the
information can be updated for each individual
audio CD via BMW Search, if desired.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Music collection
164
Updating album information via BMW
Search*
1. Highlight the desired album.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Update album data online"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB device"
Storing the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing music from the USB
medium, the existing music collection in
the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-IN port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "AUX (front)"
Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If the volume varies greatly
from the other audio sources, it makes sense to
adjust the volume to the same level.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "AUX (front)"
3. "Volume"
4. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface
166
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio
interface
Connectable devices
iPod/iPhone, mobile phone or USB devices
(MP3 player, USB flash drive). They can be
operated via iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Due to the large number of different audio
devices/mobile phones available on the market,
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile
phones at your BMW center.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
1 AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB-audio interface
iPod/iPhone
To connect the iPod/iPhone, use the BMW
cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone. For
more information, contact your BMW center or
go to the Internet: www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the iPod/iPhone to
ports 1 and 2.
The menu structure of the iPod/iPhone is sup-
ported by the USB-audio interface/mobile
phone audio interface.
USB storage device
To connect the device, use a flexible
adapter cable to protect the USB inter-
face and your USB device against physical
damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the USB device to
port 1.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000
tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected, the informa-
tion stored in the vehicle on the tracks of the
first USB device is deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
*
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
If, for example, an iPhone is connected to the
USB interface at the same time that an audio
device is connected to the AUX-IN port, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.
Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name
Track search
You can call up the tracks using the playlists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up tracks using the file directory.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-
ist".
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" is available depending on the num-
ber of entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed. Not all catego-
ries need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, call
up that artist only. All of the tracks by that
artist are then displayed.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro-
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface/mobile phone audio interface
168
vided that this is supported by the audio
device. Therefore, do not connect the USB
audio device to the power socket in the
vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.
Communications
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
172
Telephone
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a Full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent repro-
duction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and
which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones sup-
port the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 179
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the Full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
*
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
173
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
page 174, and on the mobile phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, some
default settings may be necessary for the
mobile phone: e.g. using the following
menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16-
digit number as a Bluetooth passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers the best protection against unautho-
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required after pairing is successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth"
5. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation via the mobile phone
6. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehi-
cle also appears on the mobile phone dis-
play.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
174
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends
on your mobile phone and can take several min-
utes; please refer to your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat
the pairing procedure.
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected with the mobile phone. If neces-
sary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. "Telephone"
3. "Bluetooth"
4. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are deleted as well.
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth
link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac-
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
175
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Bluetooth"
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> Dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition lock, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev-
eral minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The Full prepara-
tion package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or pointing the
open front air vents downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper-
ational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
"Accept"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
176
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select this symbol to establish the con-
nection.
or:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Toggling between calls, telephone
conference
These functions are available if supported by
your mobile phone. Toggling may not be sup-
ported by the service provider or may need to
be enabled separately.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this hand-
set.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.
Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
The ten phone numbers dialed last are stored.
Symbol Storage location*
No symbol In the vehicle.
Mobile phone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
178
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
4. The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Complete the entries if necessary.
Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis-
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Dialing a number
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may be possible to continue the con-
versation via the hands-free system. Refer to
the display on your mobile phone and/or your
mobile phone's operating instructions.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free sys-
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice
commands*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
During your entries, you will be guided in many
cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 175.
Saying commands
Activating the system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text, e.g. a name, rather than a
command is spoken, canceling is only possible
using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
{Cancel}.
{Voice commands}.
{Dial number} or {n. t. a.}
You say Voice control response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}
{Dialing}{{Dialing number}}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
180
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
A separate voice phone book is needed for
operation using voice commands.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers
stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up
or saved there using voice commands. Up to 50
entries can be set up. An entry always consists
of a name and a phone number.
Creating and editing a voice phone
book*
To store an entry:
An entry always consists of a name and a phone
number.
To delete an entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
To delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
To read and dial entries:
You can have all entries in your voice phone
book read aloud in the order in which they were
entered and select a specific entry to establish a
connection:
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dialing}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
Saying the name for the voice phone
book should not take longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. To save the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry opens.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting the phone book
opens.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading the phone book
opens.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-
ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Inserting/removing the snap-
in adapter
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
1. {Choose name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
{Redial}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Telephone
182
To conserve battery power, you should
avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
of the mobile phone
* are also displayed. The
addresses can be used as destinations for nav-
igation and the phone numbers can be dialed.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text.
Only addresses contained in the nav-
igation data in the vehicle can be
entered. This ensures that destination guid-
ance is possible for all addresses.<
6. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as the home
address
A contact that has already been created can be
stored as a home address. It is placed at the top
of the "My contacts".
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. Fill in the entry fields.
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as home address"
If the home address is deleted, only the content
of the home address entry is deleted and not
the entry itself.
My contacts
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone
*.
Displaying contacts
"My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Contacts
184
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Displaying the detailed view
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Selecting a contact as the navigation
destination
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con-
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be matched to the
navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the con-
tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone or BMW
Search is edited, the changes are not stored on
the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored
in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Symbol Storage location*
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a
destination.
Mobile phone
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, for example, res-
taurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas
stations or hotels, as well as receive the corre-
sponding telephone numbers and addresses.
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance.
Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge.
You are connected to an employee of the BMW
Concierge to obtain the required information.
You can then have the phone number and
address sent to you and, for example, use it for
destination guidance in the navigation system.
Many hotels can be booked directly through the
BMW Assist Concierge service. When an infor-
mation message is received, a list of the
received messages is displayed automatically.
Messages
The BMW Concierge messages and MyInfo
messages from the BMW Assist portal are
listed here.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Using an address for destination
guidance
"Start guidance" or "Insert as dest. in the
trip"
Dialing a phone number
"Call number in message"
Saving an address
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store contact in vehicle"
Answering messages
The message answering function is only avail-
able for MyInfo messages if answers are pre-
defined in the messages.
1. Select the message that you wish to
respond to.
2. Open "Options".
3. Open "Answer".
4. Select the desired answer.
Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message" or "Delete all mes-
sages".
Roadside Assistance
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance*
should you require help in the event of a break-
down.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
186
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "TeleService Diagnosis"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone
* is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "TeleService Diagnosis"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically if the vehicle is
equipped with BMW TeleService.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagno-
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Leave the ignition switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
Activating BMW Assist
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless net-
work coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
Using BMW Search
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Update"
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Internet*
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Internet"
The start page is displayed. The Internet pages
may not be displayed in the same way as on a
PC screen. Flash and Java applications cannot
be displayed.
Using the Internet
Menu bar
A menu bar is displayed for use. To activate the
menu bar, move the controller to the left until
the cursor is located in the menu bar.
Symbol Function
Activate the mouse cursor
Opening the start page
Refresh
Cancel
Back
Enter a URL
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
188
Navigating with the mouse pointer
1. Select the symbol.
2. Use the mouse pointer to navigate on the
page.
> To move the mouse pointer: move the
controller in the required direction
> To select an element: press the control-
ler
> To scroll: turn the controller
Status display
A symbol at the top left of the screen shows the
following statuses.
Entering an Internet address
1. "Enter URL"
2. Individually select the letters and characters
of the desired address.
3. Select "OK".
Bookmarks/favorites
Adding a bookmark
The page currently being displayed is stored as
a bookmark.
1. Select the symbol.
2. "Add to bookmarks"
Selecting a bookmark
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select the desired bookmark.
Deleting a bookmark
1. Select the symbol.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all book-
marks"
Defining a bookmark as the start page
1. Select the symbol.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Set as home URL"
Bookmarks/favorites
Zoom
Leave the browser
Symbol Function
No connection possible
Data transfer
Secure connection
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Settings
Suppressing cookies
1. Open "Options".
2. "Suppress cookies"
Suppressing pop-ups
1. Open "Options".
2. "Suppress pop-ups"
Suppressing safety warnings
1. Open "Options".
2. "Block HTTPS pop-ups"
Activating TeleService*
If the services are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Activate TeleService"
Customer Relations
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If the vehicle is equipped with BMW
Assist or the mobile phone preparation pack-
age, a voice connection is established.
Service Request*
You can send a request to your BMW center to
arrange a service appointment. The TeleSer-
vice data is transmitted during a Service
Request. Your BMW center will contact you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. The center
will contact you and a service appointment can
be arranged.
You can check when the BMW center was noti-
fied.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
190
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
BMW center*
Address and contact data of the BMW center.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Your BMW center"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
roadside assistance.
Mobility
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Refueling
194
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler door manually:
Coupe
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Convertible
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo bay trim panel
by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is
not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
195
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.6 US gal/63 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 3.3 US gal/12.5 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this
would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
196
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive on
a flat tire. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 84, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 85.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The table below provides all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following page in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following page in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
197
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: tire inflation pressures
Convertible: tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
235/40 R 18 M+S 33/230 36/250 33/230 36/250 38/260 44/300
Front: 245/40 ZR 18 33/230 - 33/230 - 39/270 -
Rear: 265/40 ZR 18 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 44/300
Front: 245/35 ZR 19 33/230 - 33/230 - 41/280 -
Rear: 265/35 ZR 19 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 231.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
235/40 R 18 M+S 36/250 42/290 36/250 42/290 41/280 51/350
Front: 245/40 ZR 18 33/230 - 35/240 - 41/280 -
Rear: 265/40 ZR 18 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 46/320
Front: 245/35 ZR 19 36/250 - 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 265/35 ZR 19 - 38/260 - 35/240 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 231.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
198
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 3208 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 32 of 2008.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
235/40 R 18 100 V
245/35 ZR 19
e.g.
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 3208
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
199
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
200
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. When selecting tires, also take their load
capacity into account. If non-approved wheels
and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their
suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their
driving safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect
a puncture, refer to page 85. Your BMW center
will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads
or at temperatures below +457/+76.
Although all-season M+S tires provide better
winter traction than summer tires, they gener-
ally fail to provide the same levels of cold-
weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. With standard-equipment tires
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
and other mixed tire sizes, swapping wheels
between the axles is not permissible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Ensure that the snow chains are sufficiently
tensioned at all times. If necessary, retension as
specified by the snow chain manufacturer.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
202
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down, otherwise injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/
25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 206
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 66
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 222
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
The oil level can be displayed when the engine
is warm. Continuous short distance travel or a
very sporty driving style may make measure-
ment impossible.
Display in the instrument cluster
1 Oil level
2 Maximum mark
3 Minimum mark
4 Computer button
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
204
Press button 4 in the turn indicator lever repeat-
edly until the oil level display appears in the
instrument cluster.
M dual clutch transmission
*: the oil level
appears in the top display.<
The oil level must be between the two mark-
ings.
A new measurement is taken automatically
each time the engine is started.
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK.
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but
no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 205. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-
level monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
4 Oil level is too high.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
5 A value cannot be read at this time. The
engine is not yet warm.
Quick measurement
In addition to the automatic measurement, you
can also determine the current oil level manu-
ally, e.g. after adding engine oil, but such mea-
surements are less accurate.
1. Park the vehicle with a warm engine, i.e.
after an uninterrupted drive of at least
6 miles/10 km, on a horizontal surface.
2. Let the engine idle.
3. Press the computer button in the turn indi-
cator lever repeatedly until the oil level dis-
play appears in the instrument cluster.
4. Press the computer button for at least
2seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
appears during measurement.
5. After approx. 1 minute, the current oil level
is displayed.
Display via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a
standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but
no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 205. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-
level monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Do not add engine oil. Before resuming your
trip, note the newly calculated distance
remaining to the next oil service, refer to
page 72. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Con-
trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add no more than 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, oth-
erwise too much engine oil can lead to engine
damage. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters,
otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to
display the new value reliably.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.<
Your BMW center will be glad to answer
any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
206
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
Approved oils belong to the 10W-60 SAE
class.<
Alternative oil types
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of other
synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use
oils with the following specifications:
> Viscosity:
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification:
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low ambient temperatures
The oils used at BMW factories for your vehicle
type are suitable for virtually any ambient tem-
perature. However, if the vehicle is operated at
temperatures below –47/–206 for extended
periods, your BMW center will be glad to rec-
ommend an optimal oil.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. If the loss of coolant is substantial, have the
cause eliminated as soon as possible.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 75; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Maintenance
208
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the
left, on the bottom of the instrument panel
underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have
worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the
warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding
services.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material tested, laboratory checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes,
otherwise water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 229
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 49
> Maximum permissible tire width
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Deactivate the rain sensor
* to prevent unin-
tentional wiping.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g.
spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a
possibility that they could be damaged.
M dual clutch transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets / high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray against the sensors and cam-
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Care
210
eras, e.g. Park Distance Control, for an
extended period and maintain a distance of at
least 12 in/30 cm.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Remove contamination, such as insects, by
soaking with shampoo or insect remover and
then rinsing with plenty of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and con-
tamination on the window can lead to
streaking when operating the windshield wip-
ers, leading to premature wear of the wiper
blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunc-
tion.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash.
When you open a wet hardtop, water
drops may run into the cargo bay. If nec-
essary, remove items from the cargo bay
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove very aggressive sub-
stances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree
resin or bird droppings, to prevent damage to
the paintwork.<
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals, otherwise noise and
damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames, with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets over 1407/606, otherwise dam-
age may occur.<
Outside sensors / cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance
Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they
remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery / cloth trim
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with suitable interior cleaners. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather / leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is
cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil
more easily.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the
leather's protective layer.
Carpets / cargo bay
You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or
clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled.
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat
rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this
may damage the mats.
Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical rea-
sons and can be removed by vacuuming
repeatedly.
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
Clean with water and, if necessary, with sol-
vent-free plastic cleaner.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Do not clean with cleaning agents as
these may destroy the fabric.<
Interior sensors / cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, use a
lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instru-
ment cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays, otherwise damage
may occur.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Care
212
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam-
age parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than six weeks, your BMW center or a
workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
Coupe
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment
on the right-hand side of the cargo bay.
Remove the cover.
Convertible
The onboard tool kit is stored in a pouch under
the cargo bay floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook
on the bottom, see arrow.
3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
the windshield, see arrow.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch, otherwise you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
214
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Control elements, display components, part of
the exterior lighting and other interior equip-
ment in your vehicle are equipped with covered
light-emitting diodes as light sources. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Accessing the bulbs
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the head-
lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover, oth-
erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the
bulbs.
2. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and
take it out.
3. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
4. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
5. Reattach the cover.
Corner-illuminating lamp*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Accessing the
bulbs.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Turn signals, front
PY24W Silver Vision bulb, 24 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left, arrow 2, and
take it out.
4. Turn the bulb socket in the bulb holder to
the right for removal and replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right using a coin.
Tail lamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other bulbs:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in
the fender.
1 Turn signal
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
3 Backup lamp
4 Brake lamp, consisting of two individual
bulbs
5 Brake force display
6 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
If the bulbs 2 and 6 malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Fender-mounted lamps
Coupe
1. Left-hand side: use a screwdriver to pry off
the cover in the cargo bay and remove the
cover.
Right-hand side: remove the cover from the
right-hand side panel of the cargo bay.
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and pull out.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
216
3. Turn signal indicator: apply gentle pressure
to the bulb while turning it to the left for
removal and replacement.
Backup lamps and brake lamps: take out
the bulbs and change them.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Convertible
1. Turn the screws on the corresponding side,
see arrow, by 90° and remove the cover.
2. While applying light pressure, turn the bulb
holder of the turn signal bulb to the left.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Lamps in the luggage compartment lid
Coupe
1. Using a screw driver, remove the fastening
plugs on the edge and in the handle
recesses of the luggage compartment lid
trim. To do so, first loosen the top part of the
plug, see arrow, and then completely
remove the plug by pulling on its bottom
part. Remove the trim.
2. Unlock the bulb holder by turning it to the
left, see arrow, and take it out.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
5. Attach the luggage compartment lid trim by
inserting the bottom part of the fastening
plug and then fixing the plug with its top
part.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Convertible
1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder,
refer to page 222. Unscrew the holder using
the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit.
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
luggage compartment lid using a screw-
driver and remove the trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
6. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart-
ment lid and the holder for the warning tri-
angle.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
parking/tail lamp and side turn signal
indicators
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Repairing a flat tire with the
M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire, your BMW M3 includes an
M Mobility System. With this system you can
apply a sealant to the inside of the tire to seal
the damaged section, restore the tire inflation
pressure and continue on your trip.
Safety measures in the event of a flat tire:
Park the vehicle as far away from moving
traffic as possible and on a firm surface. Switch
on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and engage first gear
or reverse. Have all occupants leave the vehicle
and move beyond the danger zone, e.g. behind
the guard rails.
If necessary, erect a warning triangle
* or warn-
ing flasher
* at a suitable distance. Adhere to
country-specific regulations.<
Preparations
The M Mobility System is located in the cargo
bay under the floor board.
If possible, leave any foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire in place.
Instructions on how to use the M Mobility
System can also be found on the device
itself.<
Before using the M Mobility System, fol-
low the instructions on the sealant bot-
tle.<
Remove the label with the speed restriction
from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
Please note the expiry date on the sealant
bottle.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
218
Components of the M Mobility System
1 Sealant bottle and label with speed restric-
tion
2 Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
3 Connector and cable for the cigarette
lighter socket/power socket
4 Holder for the sealant bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/off switch
7 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla-
tion pressure
8 Screw on pressure gauge to reduce tire
inflation pressure
9 Hose to connect compressor and sealant
bottle or compressor and wheel
The connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Using the M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill the sealant, refer to page 218.
> Distribute the sealant, refer to page 218.
> Produce the tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 219.
Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape under
high pressure.<
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Screw connection hose 9 onto the connec-
tor of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw 8 on the pressure gauge
is closed.
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective wheel and screw filling hose 2 of
the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of
the compressor so that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket/power socket in the interior of the
vehicle, refer to page 107.
8. With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The
inflation pressure of the tire after filling is
unimportant.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle
connector and from the tire valve.
Return the M Mobility System to its storage
location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km to
evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/
60 km/h. If possible, do not fall below a
speed of 12 mph/20 km/h.<
Producing the tire inflation pressure
1. After driving approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at a
suitable location.
2. Connect connection hose 9 of the com-
pressor directly to the tire valve.
3. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket/power socket in the interior of the
vehicle.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows:
> To increase the inflation pressure:
Switch on the compressor, position I. To
check the current inflation pressure set-
ting, briefly switch off the compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise the
device will overheat and may be dam-
aged.<
> To reduce the inflation pressure: turn
screw 8 on the pressure gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not maintained,
drive the vehicle a second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to
4.
Use of the M Mobility System may be ineffec-
tual for tire damage larger than approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 221, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel if the tire can-
not be made roadworthy with the M Mobility
System.<
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. If it is not, do not continue
driving.<
Continuing your trip
Do not exceed the maximum allowable
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h to avoid the risk
of an accident.<
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 84 for more information.
Have the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the
M Mobility System replaced as soon as possi-
ble.<
Changing wheels
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 222.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
220
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 74.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 149.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 126.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 46.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 103.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth-
erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set
in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Equipment version with Full preparation
package mobile phone. This equipment
makes it possible to send an Emergency
Request even if no mobile phone is paired
with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 186.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
wireless network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab-
lished. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if it can be determined.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to
assist you around the clock in the event of a
breakdown, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can
establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis-
tance for breakdown assistance directly via
iDrive, refer to page 185.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
222
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
Coupe
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Convertible
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment
under the front passenger's seat.
To open: press the button and fold the cover
down.
To close: fold the cover back up and press it into
the catch.
Warning triangle*
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it
out.
Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take
it out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 203. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
224
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard tool kit under-
neath the cover on the right-hand side of the
cargo bay, refer to page 213.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard tool kit
underneath the cargo bay floor, refer to
page 213.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 55, otherwise the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Ensure that the parking lock P is not
engaged as the rear wheels will otherwise
be blocked.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 57, note that the parking lock P is
engaged automatically after approx. 30 min-
utes, blocking the rear wheels.
If an electrical malfunction occurs or if towing
takes longer than approx. 20 minutes, manually
release the parking lock, refer to page 60.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph/50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance of 30 miles/50 km, otherwise the
transmission can be damaged.<
BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on
a tow truck with a flat bed.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck
Manual transmission:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
M dual clutch transmission:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Tow-starting
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
jump-start the engine, refer to page 222. Vehi-
cles with a catalytic converter should only be
tow-started when the engine is cold.
Manual transmission
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Vehicles with an M dual clutch transmission
cannot be tow-started. Jump-starting, refer to
page 222.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technical data
228
Technical data
Engine data
M3
Displacement cu in/cmμ 244/3,999
Number of cylinders 8
Maximum power output hp 414
at engine speed rpm 8,300
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 295/400
at engine speed rpm 3,900
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
229
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 38 ft 5 in/11.7 m.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Technical data
230
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 38 ft 5 in/11.7 m.
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
231
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
Capacities
M3
Approved gross weight lbs/kg 4,586/2,080
Load lbs/kg 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 15.2/430
M3
Approved gross weight lbs/kg 5,027/2,280
Load lbs/kg 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,337/1,060
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 7.4-12.4/210-350
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.6/63 Fuel grade: page 195
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 3.3/12.5
Window washer system For more details: page 66
including headlamp washers US qt/liters approx. 4.8/4.5
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
232
Short commands for the voice activation
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
*
Function Command
Switching on the radio {Radio on}
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Tone control {Tone}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
* {Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
* {Phonebook}
Opening BMW Assist
* {B M W Assist}
Opening the home address
* {Home address}
Opening destination entry
* {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
* {Guidance}
Function Command
Playing back a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track ...} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD {C D and D V D}
CD and DVD changer
* {C D and D V D}
CD and DVD menu {C D and D V D}
Playing back a DVD {D V D on}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
233
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Music collection
External devices
Tone control
Radio
FM
Selecting a DVD {D V D ...}
Switching on the DVD changer {D V D on}
Entertainment details on the split screen {Entertainment details}
Function Command
Function Command
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Playing back the music collection {Music collection on}
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Switching on the radio {Radio on}
Calling up FM {F M}
Playing FM {F M on}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Calling up a frequency {Frequency ... megahertz} e.g. 93.5 mega-
hertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a radio station {Station ...} e.g. W-PLJ
Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
234
AM
Weather Band
Satellite radio
Stored stations
Telephone
Function Command
Calling up AM {A M}
Playing AM {A M on}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Calling up a frequency {Frequency ... Kilohertz} e.g. frequency
753 kilohertz or 753 kilohertz
Function Command
Calling up the Weather Band {Weather band}
Switching on the Weather Band {Weather band on}
Selecting a Weather Band station {Select a weather channel}
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Satellite radio channel ...} e.g. channel 2
Function Command
Opening the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset ...} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying the phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth {Bluetooth devices}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
235
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Navigation
General information
Map
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Perspective map}
Automatic scaling of the map
* {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Scale...feet
* {Map scale ... feet} e.g. map scale of 100 feet
Scale...meters
* {Map scale ... meters} e.g. map scale of
100 meters
Scale...kilometers
* {Map scale ... kilometers} e.g. map scale of
5 kilometers
Scale...miles
* {Map scale ... miles} e.g. map scale of 5 miles
Scale...yards
* {Map scale ... yards} e.g. map scale of
100 yards
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
236
Split screen settings
Contacts
BMW Assist
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen perspective {Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Split screen scale...feet
* {Split screen scale ... feet} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters
* {Split screen scale ... meters} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers
* {Split screen scale ... kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles
* {Split screen scale ... miles} e.g. split screen
scale of 5 miles
Split screen scale...yards
* {Split screen scale ... yards} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 yards
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Function Command
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist {B M W Assist}
Opening BMW Search
* {B M W Search}
Opening the Internet
* {Internet}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Equipment
Function Command
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle information}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Central display settings {Central display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings {Limit}
Opening the light menu {Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
238
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 63
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 221
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 99
Adaptive brake light
– brake force display 88
Adaptive Head Light 93
Additives
– coolant 206
Address, entering 127, 133
Address for navigation
– entering 127, 133
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 97
Adjusting the thigh support 43
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 146
Airbags 88
– indicator/warning lamp 90
– sitting safely 42
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air distribution
– automatic 97
Air flow rate 98
Airing, refer to Ventilation 99
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 196
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Air supply
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air vents 96
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 195
Alarm system 32
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
– interior motion sensor 33
– switching off an alarm 33
– tilt alarm sensor 33
Album information for
music 163
Albums of music
collection 163
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 200
AM, waveband 149
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Antenna for mobile phone 172
Antifreeze
– coolant 206
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS
82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Anti-theft system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 231
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 231
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 105
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 70
Ashtray
– front 106
– rear 107
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 98
Audio 146
– controls 146
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Audio device, external 105
Automatic
– air distribution 97
– air flow rate 97
– cruise control 66
– headlamp control 92
Automatic car washes 209
Automatic climate control 96
– automatic air distribution 97
Automatic curb monitor 49
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 98
Automatic Service
Request 189
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– towing 223
– tow-starting 223
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 97
AUX-IN port 165
Average fuel consumption 70
– setting the units 71
Avoid highways in
navigation 137
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 231
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 43
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 45
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 215
Backup lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 215
Bag holder 109
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 222
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 224
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 181
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 105
Bass, tone setting 146
Battery 219
– charging 219
– disposal 35, 219
– jump starting 222
– remote control 26
– temporary power failure 220
Battery for mobile phone 181
Battery renewal
– remote control 35
– remote control for vehicle 35
Being towed 224
Belt hand-over 48
Belts, refer to Safety belts 47
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 47
Beverage holders, refer to
Cup holders 106
Blinds, refer to Roller sun
blinds 104
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 98
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 174
Bluetooth, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
BMW
– car shampoo 211
BMW Assist, activating 186
BMW Assist 185
BMW center 190
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 207
BMW Search 186
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Brake assist 82
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 72
Brake force display 88
– bulb change 216
Brake lamps
– replacing bulb 215
Brake lights
– brake force display 88
Brake pads 116
– breaking in 116
Brake rotors 117
– brakes 116
– breaking in 116
Brakes
– ABS 82
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– brake force display 88
– breaking in 116
– parking brake 57
– service requirements 72
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 117
Brake system 116
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– breaking in 116
– disc brakes 117
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 221
Breaking in the clutch 116
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 116
Break-in period 116
Brightness of the Control
Display 79
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 213
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 55
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 175
– ending 176
– rejecting 176
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 176
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Capacities 231
Capacity of the cargo bay 231
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 219
Car care, refer to Care 209
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
240
Care 209
– automatic car washes 209
– care products 209
– carpets 211
– CD/DVD drives 212
– chrome parts 210
– displays 211
– exterior 209
– fine wood parts 211
– headlamps 210
– high-pressure washer 209
– interior 211
– leather 211
– light-alloy wheels 211
– paintwork 210
– plastic parts 211
– retractable hardtop 210
– rubber seals 210
– safety belts 211
– sensors and cameras 211
– upholstery and cloth
trim 211
– washing the car
manually 210
– windows 210
– wiper blades 210
Cargo, securing 119
Cargo bay
– capacity 231
– convenient access 34
– folding up the floor
panel 110
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 94
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 119
– stowing cargo 119
– vehicle 118
Car jack
– jacking points 219
Car key, refer to Remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 172
Car radio, refer to Radio 149
Car shampoo 211
Car wash
– before entering 57
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 116
CBS Condition Based
Service
207
CD, audio playback 154
CD changer 154
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 156
– installation location 158
– random play sequence 155
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
CD player 154
– controls 146
– fast forward/reverse 156
– random play sequence 155
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Center armrest 105
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 217
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Central locking system 27
– convenient access 34
– hotel function 31
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 213
Changing gears 60
Changing the language on the
Control Display 79
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 71
Changing wheels 219
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 203
Check Control 76
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 54
Child-restraint systems 53
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 53
Chrome parts 211
Chrome polish 211
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 107
Cleaning headlamps 65
– washer fluid 66
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 209
Clock
68
– 12h/24h mode 75
– setting the time and date 75
– setting time 74
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 106
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Combined instrument, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 34
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Compass 103
Computer 69
– displays on Control
Display 70
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
Concierge service 185
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 118
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Condition Based Service
CBS 207
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 29
Congestion
– refer to Route, bypassing
sections 138
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 107
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 70
Consumption indicator, refer
to Average consumption 70
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display
– brightness 79
– changing the language 79
– switching off/on 19
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16
Convenient access 34
– replacing the battery 35
Convenient loading in
convertible 28
Convenient operation
– glass roof 28
– glass roof with convenient
access 34
– retractable hardtop 28
– windows 28
– windows with convenient
access 34
Convertible
– bag holder 109
– convenient loading 28
– enlarging cargo bay 108
– folding down rear
backrest 109
– retractable hardtop 38
– rollover protection
system 90
– securing cargo 119
Coolant 206
– checking level 206
Coolant temperature 69
Cooling, maximum 97
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 206
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 206
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head
Light 93
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 93
Correct tires 200
Country codes DVD 156
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 94
Criteria for route 137
Cross-hairs in navigation 132
Cruise control 66
Cruising range 70
Cup holders 106
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 231
Current playback of music
collection 162
Current position
– displaying 143
Customer Relations 189
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Data, technical 228
– dimensions 229
– engine 228
– weights 231
Data transfer 190
Date
– date format 76
– setting 75
Daytime running lamps 93
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 89
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
Destination, entering by town/
city name 127
Destination address
– entering 127, 133
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 133
– entering via map 132
– entry 127
– home address 130
– manual entry 127
Destination guidance 137
– bypassing a route
section 138
– changing specified
route 137
– continuing 137
– starting 137
– voice instructions 138
– volume of voice
instructions 139
Digital clock 68
Digital compass 103
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 150
Dimensions 229
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 138
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 129
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
242
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 228
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Displays
– on the Control Display 16
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 206
– remote control battery 35
– vehicle battery 219
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 72
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 81
Door key, refer to Remote
control 26
Door lock 30
Doors, emergency
operation 30
DOT Quality Grades 198
Draft-free ventilation 99
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 106
Drivelogic 61
Drive mode 59
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Drive-off assistant 84
Drive position, engaging, refer
to Selector lever
positions 58
Drive programs, refer to
Drivelogic 61
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 92
Driving notes 116
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 84
Driving stability control
systems 82
Driving through water 117
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 116
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 99
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 82
DVD
– country codes 156
– settings 157
– video playback 156
DVD menu 157
DVD video 156
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
– indicator/warning lamp 83
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
E
EDC, refer to Electronic
Damper Control 83
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 146
Electric
– seat adjustment 43
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
– M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 60
Electric seat 43
Electric seat adjustment 43
Electric steering wheel lock
– with convenient access 34
Electronic brake-force
distribution 82
Electronic Damper Control
EDC 83
Electronic oil level check 203
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 82
Emergency operation
– fuel filler door, manual
release 194
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 37
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 30
Emergency release
– luggage compartment lid
from inside 32
Emergency Request 221
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 221
Engine
– breaking in 116
– data 228
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 69
– speed 228
– starting 56
– starting, convenient
access 34
– switching off 56
Engine compartment 203
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 206
Engine oil
– adding 205
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– checking level 203
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 72
– possible displays 204
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 228
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 228
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 56
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 94
Entry map for destination 132
Equalizer, tone setting 147
Error messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Event data recorders 208
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 116
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Exterior mirrors 48
– adjusting 48
– automatic dimming
feature 49
– automatic heating 49
– folding in and out 49
External audio device 105
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 224
– for tying down loads 119
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Failure of an electrical
consumer 220
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 33
– switching off an alarm 33
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 47
Fastest route for
navigation 137
Fast forward
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 99
First aid pouch 222
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 55
Flash when locking/
unlocking 29
Flat tire
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
Flat tire, repairing 217
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– indicating a flat tire 85
– indicator/warning lamp 85
– initializing the system 84
– malfunction 85
– snow chains 84, 201
– system limits 84
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 199
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 66
FM, waveband 149
Folding up the floor panel 110
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 117
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 94
Forward position, engaging,
refer to Selector lever
positions 58
For your own safety 5
Free memory capacity, music
collection 164
Front airbags 88
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
Fuel 195
– average consumption 70
– gauge 69
– high-quality brands 195
– quality 195
– specifications 195
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 231
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Fuel filler door 194
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 194
Fuses 220
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 101
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 70
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 195
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Gasoline engine, checking
engine oil level 203
Gear
– neutral 59
Gear display, refer to Displays
in the instrument cluster 60
Gearshift lever
– manual transmission 57
Gearshifts
– manual transmission 57
General driving notes 116
Glass roof, electric 37
– closing after electrical
malfunction 37
– convenient operation 28, 30
– initializing 37
– opening, closing 37
– operation with convenient
access 34
– pinch protection system 37
– power failure 37
– raising 37
– remote control 28
Glove compartment 104
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 126
Grills 96
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 231
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 150
Head airbags 88
Headlamp control,
automatic 92
Headlamp flasher 64
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Head restraints 44
– rear, removing 45
– sitting safely 42
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
244
Heated
– mirrors 49
– rear window 99
– seats 46
Heating
– mirrors 49
– rear window 99
– residual heat 98
– seats 46
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 96
Heating while at a standstill,
refer to Using residual
heat 98
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 119
Height, refer to
Dimensions 229
Height adjustment
– seats 43
– steering wheel 50
High beams 94
– headlamp flasher 94
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 150
High-pressure
washer 209, 210
High water, refer to Driving
through water 117
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 137
Hills 117
Holders for cups 106
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 202
Hooks for shopping bags 109
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function 31
Hot exhaust system 116
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Brake assist 82
Hydroplaning 117
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 150
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 155
ID3 tags, refer to Album
information 163
Identification marks, tire
coding 198
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 79
– changing language 79
– changing units of measure
and display format 71
– controls 16
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– overview 16
– setting the date and time 75
– start menu 17
– status information 19
iDrive operating principle 16
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 55
Ignition lock 55
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– MDrive 51
– M Dynamic Mode 83
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 196
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Initializing
– after power failure 220
– compass, refer to Digital
compass, calibrating 103
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– glass roof 37
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 149
– refer to Setting the time and
date 75
Installation location
– CD changer 158
– navigation DVD drive 126
– telephone 105
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 138
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 94
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 101
Interior lamps 94
– remote control 28
Interior motion sensor 33
Interior rearview mirror 49
– automatic dimming
feature 49
– compass 103
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 65
Intersection, entering,
navigation 128
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 165
iPod, connecting, refer to
USB-audio interface 166
J
Jacking points 219
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 222
Jump starting 222
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
K
Key, refer to Remote
control 26
Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 34
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 34
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Knock control 195
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 92
– parking lamps/low beams 92
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 213
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 47
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 119
Last destinations 130
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 54
Launch Control 63
Leather care 211
LED light-emitting diodes 214
Length, refer to
Dimensions 229
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 217
Light-alloy wheels 211
Light-emitting diodes
LED 214
Lighter 107
– connecting electrical
appliances 107
Lighting
– instruments 94
– lamps and bulbs 213
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 92
Light switch 92
Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 119
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 31
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 29
– from inside 31
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 34
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Low-beam headlamps 92
– automatic 92
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 43
Luggage compartment lid 31
– convenient access 34
– emergency release 32
– locking or unlocking
separately 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– remote control 28
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 120
Lumbar support 43
LW, waveband 149
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 200
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 207
Malfunction
– tires 85
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 76
Managing music 163
Manual car wash 210
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler door 194
– glass roof 37
– transmission lock 60
Manual transmission 57
– tow-starting 225
Map display 139
Map for navigation
– changing scale 139
– entering destination 132
Master key, refer to Remote
control 26
Maximum cooling 97
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 200
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 82
"MDrive" 50
MDrive 50
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 58
– kick-down 59
– Launch Control 63
– neutral 59
– reverse gear 59
– sequential mode 59
– Shift Lights 62
– shiftlock 59
– tow-starting 225
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 60
M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
– indicator lamp 83
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 229
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
M Engine Dynamics
Control 64
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
– for automatic climate
control 99
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 207
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice commands 14
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
246
Mirror dimming feature 49
Mirrors 48
– automatic curb monitor 49
– exterior mirrors 48
– heating 49
– interior rearview mirror 49
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 49
M Mobility System 217
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 175
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– operation via iDrive 175
– pairing 172
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 105
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 172
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port 165
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB-audio interface 166
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper system 65
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16
Music, playing 162
Music collection 161
– backup 164
– importing 164
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 165
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB-audio
interface 166
Music search 162
N
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 138
Navigation data 126
Navigation drive, location 126
Navigation DVD 126
Navigation system 126
– address book 129
– bypassing a route
section 138
– continuing destination
guidance 137
– destination entry 127
– displaying current
position 143
– entering a destination by
voice 133
– entering a destination
manually 127
– route list 138
– selecting destination via
map 132
– selecting route criteria 137
– special destinations 130
– starting destination
guidance 137
– terminating destination
guidance 137
– voice instructions 138
– volume adjustment 139
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 44
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 105
Neutral 59
New tires 199
North-facing map 139
Nozzles 96
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 228
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 225
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 208
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 195
Odometer 68
Oil, refer to Engine oil 203
Oil consumption 203
Oil level 203
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 219
Onboard tool kit 213
Opening and closing
– convenient access 34
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 30
– via the remote control 27
Options, selecting for
navigation 137
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 99
Output, refer to Engine
data 228
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 98
Outside temperature
display 68
– changing units of
measure 71
– in computer 71
Outside temperature
warning 68
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
Overview
– radio control 146
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
P
Paintwork care 210
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 81
Park Distance Control PDC 81
Parked car ventilation 99
– preselecting switch-on
times 100
– switching on and off
directly 100
Parking
– vehicle 56
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 81
Parking brake 57
– indicator lamp 57
Parking lamps 92
Parking lamps/low beams 92
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 49
Pathway lighting 93
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 175
Phone numbers
– dialing 176
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual
Polish 211
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 99
Position, refer to Current
position, displaying 143
Postal code, entering for
navigation 128
Power failure 220
Power windows 35
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
Pressure, tires 196
Pressure monitoring, tires 84
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 222
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
R
Radio
– controls 146
– High Definition Radio 150
– satellite radio 152
– selecting a waveband 149
– storing stations 149
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 55
Radio readiness 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Rain sensor 65
Reading lamps 95
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 215
– replacing bulb 215
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 45
– folding down backrests 108
Rear turn signals
– replacing bulb 215
Rear ventilation 99
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 48
Rear window defroster 99
Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sun blinds 104
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19
Reception
– quality 150
– radio station 150
Recirculated-air mode 98
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 43
Refueling 194
Releasing
– hood 202
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 70
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 35
– convenient access 34
– garage door opener 101
– luggage compartment lid 28
– malfunction 29, 35
– removing from the ignition
lock 55
– service data 207
Replacement remote
control
26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 213
Replacing tires 199
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 199
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 148
Residual heat 98
Restraint systems
– for children 53
– refer to Safety belts 47
Retractable hardtop 38
– convenient operation 28
– opening and closing 39
– remote control 28
Reverse
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
248
Reverse gear 59
– manual transmission 58
Road map 139
Roadside
Assistance 185, 221
Roadside parking lamps 94
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 72
Roller sun blinds 104
Rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– resetting 90
Roof load capacity 231
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 120
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 225
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 137, 138
– bypassing sections 138
– changing 137, 138
– changing criteria 137
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 138
– map display 139
– selecting 137
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 138
Route map, refer to Map
display 139
Route section, changing 138
Route selection 137
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 47
Safety belts 47
– belt hand-over 48
– damage 48
– indicator/warning lamp 48
– reminder 48
– sitting safely 42
Safety systems
– airbags 88
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
– brake system 82
– driving stability control
systems 82
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
– rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– safety belts 47
Satellite radio 152
– enabling channel 152
– selecting channel 153
– storing channel 153
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 224
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 152
Sealant, filling 218
Seat adjustment
– electric 43
– mechanical 43
Seat and mirror memory 46
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 48
Seat heating 46
Seats 42
– adjusting electrically 43
– adjusting the seats 43
– heating 46
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 46
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 46
– sitting safely 42
Securing cargo 110, 112
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Selecting new scale for
navigation 139
Selector lever positions 58
Sequential M Gearbox with
Drivelogic
– Drivelogic drive programs 61
Sequential mode 59
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 221
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 221
Service data in the remote
control 207
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 207
Service Request 189
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 207
Service requirements 72
Services status 190
Settings
– changing settings on the
Control Display 79
– clock, 12h/24h format 75
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 50
– DVD 157
– language 79
Settings and information 71
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 100
Shifting 60
Shifting gears
– manual transmission 57
Shift lever 58
Shift Lights 62
Shiftlock 59
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 60
Shift-up display, refer to Shift
Lights 62
Shock absorber control, refer
to Electronic Damper
Control EDC 83
Short commands for the voice
activation system 232
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 137
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 155
– CD player 155
Side airbags 88
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 42
– with airbags 42
– with head restraint 42
– with safety belts 42
Ski bag 110
Ski bag for convertible, refer to
Through-loading opening
with integrated transport
bag 111
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 37
Slot for remote control 55
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 107
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 181
– use 172
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 105
Snow chains 201
Socket, On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 208
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 107
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 221
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 146
Spare fuses, 220
Spare fuses, refer to
Fuses 220
Special destinations 130
Speed
– with winter tires 200
Speed limit 78
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 78
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 147
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 19
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 65
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Start/stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 222
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 222
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 55
Start menu 17
State/province, for
navigation 127
Station, selecting
– radio 149
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 209, 210
Steering wheel 50
– adjustment 50
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– lock 55
– locking with convenient
access 34
– MDrive button 50
– shift paddles 60
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 60
Storage 212
Storage compartments 105
Storage nets 109
"Store Channel"
on the radio 153
Storing music 161
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 46
Storing tires 200
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 105
Street, entering,
navigation 128
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 196
Surface ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 68
SVCD 156
SW, waveband 149
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 56
Switching on
– audio 146
– CD changer 146
– CD player 146
– radio 146
Switching the cooling function
on and off 99
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 100
Symbols 4
– status information 19
– traffic bulletins for navigation
system 140
T
Tachometer 68
Tail lamp
– replacing bulb 217
Tail lamps 215
– replacing bulb 215
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 231
Technical data 228
– capacities 231
– dimensions 229
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telephone 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 105
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
TeleService Diagnosis 186
TeleService Help 186
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
250
Temperature
– automatic climate control 97
– changing unit of measure 71
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 69
Temperature display
– outside temperature 68
– outside temperature
warning 68
– setting the units 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 119
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 217
Through-loading opening with
integrated transport
bag 111
Through-loading system 108
Tilt alarm sensor 33
Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 49
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 100
Tire inflation pressure 196
– loss 85, 86
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– resetting the system 86
– system limitations 85
– warning lamp 86
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 85
Tire Quality Grading 198
Tires
– age 198
– air loss 86
– breaking in 116
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 219
– condition 199
– damage 199
– inflation pressure 196
– labels 198
– minimum tread depth 199
– new wheels and tires 199
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– puncture 85
– replacing 199
– size 198
– storage
200
– tread depth 199
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 199
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 200
– winter tires 200
TMC station, refer to
Traffic bulletins 140
Tone
– control 146
– middle setting 148
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 213
Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 38
Top 50 of music
collection 163
Torque, refer to Engine
data 228
Tow bar 224
Tow fitting 224
– screw thread 224
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 224
Towing 223
– with manual
transmission 224
– with M dual clutch
transmission 224
Towing and tow-starting 223
Towing methods 224
Town/city, for navigation 127
Tow rope 225
Tow-starting 223, 225
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 85
Track
– selecting on CD 154
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Traffic bulletins
– categories 141
Traffic bulletins, filtering 141
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 140
– during destination
guidance 141
– in map display 141
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
bulletins 140
Transmission
– Drivelogic 61
– Launch Control 63
– manual transmission 57
– reverse gear 59
– Shift Lights 62
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 60
Transmission lock, unlocking
manually 60
Transporting children
safely 53
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 119
Travel instructions,
refer to Voice
instructions 138
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 199
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 68
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Triple turn signal activation 64
Trip odometer 68
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 31
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 229
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
– triple turn signal 64
Turn signals 64
TV
– control elements 146
– switching on/off 146
– tone control 146
– volume 146
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 119
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 198
Units
– average consumption 71
– temperature 71
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 101
Universal mobile phone
preparation package, refer
to separate Owner's Manual
Universal remote control 101
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 34
Unlocking
– from inside 31
– from outside 27
– luggage compartment lid 34
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 34
USB-audio interface 166
V
VCD 156
Vehicle
– battery 219
– breaking in 116
– cargo loading 118
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 203
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 229
– parking 56
– weight 231
Vehicle jack 219
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 143
Vehicle storage 212
Ventilation 99
– draft-free 99
– in the rear 99
Ventilation, refer to Climate 96
Ventilation while at a
standstill 99
Vents, refer to Ventilation 99
Video menu 156
Video playback 156
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 138
Voice commands
– overview 22
– short commands 232
Voice instructions from
navigation system 138
– repeating 139
– switching on/off 138
– volume 139
Volume 146
– audio sources 146
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 231
– mobile phone 175
– TV 146
– voice instructions 139
Volume balance, tone
setting 147
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 76
Warning triangle 222
Washer fluid 66
– content of the reservoir 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 106
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 117
Water penetration 209, 210
Waveband with the radio 149
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 199
Weights 231
Welcome lamps 92
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 200
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 229
Wheels, new 199
Wheels and tires 196
Width, refer to
Dimensions 229
Wind deflector 40
Windows 35
– convenient operation 28
– convenient operation with
convenient access 34
– opening, closing 35
– pinch protection system 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 65
Windshield wash 65
– filling capacity, reservoir 231
– nozzles 66
– reservoir for washer fluid 66
– washer fluid 66
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 213
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 65
Winter tires 200
– setting speed limit 78
– storage 200
Wiper blade replacement 213
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
252
Wiper system 65
Word-matching principle for
navigation 137
Work in the engine
compartment 202
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 213
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 214
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to MDrive 50
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 26
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
01 41 2 600 999 ue iDrive
*BL260099900L*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
ba8_E9293M3_cic.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 19. August 2008 12:01 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 999 - © 08/08 BMW AG
